blob: 39e864b35083d1df611443a23d0b77bd689de9b0 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010087/**
88 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
89 *
90 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
91 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
92 * between different stations/interfaces.
93 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
94 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
95 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
96 *
97 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
98 * driver operation.
99 *
100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
101 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
102 *
103 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
104 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
105 *
106 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
107 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
108 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
109 *
110 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
111 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
112 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
113 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
114 * .release_buffered_frames().
115 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
116 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
117 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
118 */
119
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500120struct device;
121
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400122/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200123 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
124 *
125 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200127 */
128enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200129 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200131};
132
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200133#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
134
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200135/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800136 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
137 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
141 */
142enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
143 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
144 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
145 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
147};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200148#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800149
150/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400151 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
152 *
153 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100154 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400155 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400156 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200157 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
158 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400159 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100160 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300161 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200162 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400163 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700164struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200165 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100166 u16 cw_min;
167 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200168 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300169 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200170 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700171};
172
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700173struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
174 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
175 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
178};
179
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100180/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200181 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
186 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200188 */
189enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100190 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200195};
196
197/**
198 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
199 *
200 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
201 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
202 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100203 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200204 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200205 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
206 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
207 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
208 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100209 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100210 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200211 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
212 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
213 */
214struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100215 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200216 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200217
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200218 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
219
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100220 bool radar_enabled;
221
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100222 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200223};
224
225/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300226 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
227 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
228 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
229 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
230 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
231 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
232 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
233 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
234 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
235 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
236 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
237 * for changes/removal.)
238 */
239enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
240 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
242};
243
244/**
245 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
246 *
247 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
248 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
249 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
250 * done.
251 *
252 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
253 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
254 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
255 */
256struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
257 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
258 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
260};
261
262/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100263 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
264 *
265 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
266 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
267 *
268 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
269 * also implies a change in the AID.
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700273 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
277 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
279 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
281 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200282 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300284 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200285 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
286 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200287 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300290 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100292 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
293 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300294 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
295 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
297 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
298 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100299 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100300 */
301enum ieee80211_bss_change {
302 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
303 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
304 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200306 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200307 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300314 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300317 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100321 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300322 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200325
326 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100327};
328
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300329/*
330 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
331 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
332 * filtering will be disabled.
333 */
334#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
335
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100336/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200337 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
338 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200339 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300340 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300341 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
342 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
343 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700344 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200345enum ieee80211_event_type {
346 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200347 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300348 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300349 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200350};
351
352/**
353 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
354 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
355 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
356 */
357enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700358 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
359 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
360};
361
362/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200363 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200364 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
365 */
366struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
367 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
368};
369
370/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200371 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
372 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200373 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200374 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
375 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200376 */
377enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
378 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200379 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200380 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
381 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200382};
383
384/**
385 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
386 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
387 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
388 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
389 */
390enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
391 MLME_SUCCESS,
392 MLME_DENIED,
393 MLME_TIMEOUT,
394};
395
396/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200397 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200398 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
399 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
400 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
401 */
402struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
403 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
404 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
405 u16 reason;
406};
407
408/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300409 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
410 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
411 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300412 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300413 */
414struct ieee80211_ba_event {
415 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
416 u16 tid;
417 u16 ssn;
418};
419
420/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200421 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200422 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200423 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200424 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300425 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300426 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200427 */
428struct ieee80211_event {
429 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
430 union {
431 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200432 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300433 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200434 } u;
435};
436
437/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100438 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
439 *
440 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
441 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
442 *
443 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200444 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
445 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530446 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100447 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
448 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200449 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
450 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
451 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
452 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
453 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
454 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100455 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200456 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300457 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200458 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100459 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
460 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
461 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
462 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200463 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200464 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
465 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200466 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100467 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
468 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200469 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
470 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
471 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700472 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800473 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200474 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
475 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
476 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300477 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100478 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200479 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
480 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100481 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
482 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100483 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200484 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200485 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
486 * implies disabled
487 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300488 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
489 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
490 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
491 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100492 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
493 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
494 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200495 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200496 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
497 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
498 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300499 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
500 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200501 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300502 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
503 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200504 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100505 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
506 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
507 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
508 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
509 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
510 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100511 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100512 */
513struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200514 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100515 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200516 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530517 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100518 u16 aid;
519 /* erp related data */
520 bool use_cts_prot;
521 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300522 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200523 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800524 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700525 u16 beacon_int;
526 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200527 u64 sync_tsf;
528 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100529 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100530 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300531 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100532 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200533 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200534 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
535 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100536 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300537 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100538 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200539 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200540 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300541 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300542 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
543 size_t ssid_len;
544 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200545 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100546 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100547 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100548};
549
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800550/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200551 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800552 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700553 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800554 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100555 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200556 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
557 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
558 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
559 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
560 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
561 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
562 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
563 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
564 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
565 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
566 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200567 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200568 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
569 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200570 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200571 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
572 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200573 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200574 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200575 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
576 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
577 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
578 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
579 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
580 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
581 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
582 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200583 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
584 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
585 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300586 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
587 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200588 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
589 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
590 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600591 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
592 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
593 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100594 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
595 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
596 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200597 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
598 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200599 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
600 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100601 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
602 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
603 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200604 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
605 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
606 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
607 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100608 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
609 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
610 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100611 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
612 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
613 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200614 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
615 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
616 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400617 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200618 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
619 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100620 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
621 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
622 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
623 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200624 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
625 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
626 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530627 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
628 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
629 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200630 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
631 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
632 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200633 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
634 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530635 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
636 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
637 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200638 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
639 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
640 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530641 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
642 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
643 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
644 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
645 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200646 *
647 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
648 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800649 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200650enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200651 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200652 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
653 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
654 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
655 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
656 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
657 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
658 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
659 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
660 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
661 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
662 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
663 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600664 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100665 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200666 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200667 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100668 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200669 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100670 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100671 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200672 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400673 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200676 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200678 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530681 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200682};
683
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200684#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
685
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200686/**
687 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
688 *
689 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
690 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530691 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
692 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200693 *
694 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
695 */
696enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
697 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530698 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200699};
700
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200701/*
702 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
703 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
704 */
705#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
706 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
708 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
709 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100710 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200711 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200712 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200713
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530714/**
715 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
716 * Rate Control algorithm.
717 *
718 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
719 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
720 *
721 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
722 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
723 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
724 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
725 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100726 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
727 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530728 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
729 * Greenfield mode.
730 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100731 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
732 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
733 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530734 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
735 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
736 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
737 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
738 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200739enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
740 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
741 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
742 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
743
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100744 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200745 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
746 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
747 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
748 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
749 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100750 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
751 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
752 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800753};
754
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200755
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200756/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
757#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200758
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200759/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
760#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
761
762/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200763#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200764
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200765/* maximum number of rate table entries */
766#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
767
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200768/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200769 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200770 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200771 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
772 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200773 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200774 *
775 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
776 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
777 *
778 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
779 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200780 *
781 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
782 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
783 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
784 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
785 * information
786 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
787 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
788 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
789 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
790 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
791 * information should then contain
792 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
793 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
794 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200795 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200796struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
797 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100798 u16 count:5,
799 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000800} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200801
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100802#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
803
804static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
805 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
806{
807 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200808 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
809 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100810}
811
812static inline u8
813ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
814{
815 return rate->idx & 0xF;
816}
817
818static inline u8
819ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
820{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200821 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100822}
823
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200824/**
825 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200826 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200827 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
828 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
829 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
830 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
831 *
832 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200833 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200834 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100835 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700836 * @control: union for control data
837 * @status: union for status data
838 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100839 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700840 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100841 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700842 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200843 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200844 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200845struct ieee80211_tx_info {
846 /* common information */
847 u32 flags;
848 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200849
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200850 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100851
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100852 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100853
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200854 union {
855 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200856 union {
857 /* rate control */
858 struct {
859 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
860 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
861 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200862 u8 use_rts:1;
863 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200864 u8 short_preamble:1;
865 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200866 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200867 };
868 /* only needed before rate control */
869 unsigned long jiffies;
870 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200871 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200872 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
873 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200874 u32 flags;
875 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200876 } control;
877 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200878 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200879 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200880 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100881 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200882 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300883 u16 tx_time;
884 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200885 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200886 struct {
887 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
888 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200889 u8 pad[4];
890
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200891 void *rate_driver_data[
892 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
893 };
894 void *driver_data[
895 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200896 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700897};
898
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300899/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200900 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
901 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200902 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
903 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
904 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200905 *
906 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
907 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
908 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
909 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
910 */
911struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
912 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
913 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
914 const u8 *common_ies;
915 size_t common_ie_len;
916};
917
918
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200919static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
920{
921 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
922}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400923
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200924static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
925{
926 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
927}
928
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200929/**
930 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
931 *
932 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
933 *
934 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
935 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
936 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
937 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
938 *
939 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
940 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
941 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
942 */
943static inline void
944ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
945{
946 int i;
947
948 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
949 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
950 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
951 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
952 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
953 /* clear the rate counts */
954 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
955 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
956
957 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200958 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200959 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
960 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
961 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
962}
963
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400964
965/**
966 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
967 *
968 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
969 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
970 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
971 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400972 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
973 * verification has been done by the hardware.
974 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
975 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
976 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400977 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
978 * the frame.
979 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
980 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800981 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100982 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
983 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
984 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800985 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
986 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
987 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200988 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200989 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100990 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200991 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
992 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100993 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
994 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200995 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
996 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
997 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200998 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
999 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1000 * each A-MPDU
1001 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
1002 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
1003 * monitoring purposes only
1004 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1005 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1006 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1007 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1008 * on this subframe
1009 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1010 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001011 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001012 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001013 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1014 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001015 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1016 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1017 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1018 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1019 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1020 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1021 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1022 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1023 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001024 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1025 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1026 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001027 */
1028enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001029 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1030 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1031 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1032 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1033 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1034 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001035 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001036 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1037 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1038 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1039 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1040 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1041 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1042 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
1043 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
1044 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
1045 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1046 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1047 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1048 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001049 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001050 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001051 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001052 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001053 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1054 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001055 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001056 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001057};
1058
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001059#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1060
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001061/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001062 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1063 *
1064 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1065 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1066 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001067 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001068 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001069 */
1070enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1071 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001072 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1073 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001074};
1075
1076/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001077 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1078 *
1079 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1080 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001081 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001082 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001083 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1084 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001085 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1086 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001087 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001088 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001089 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1090 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1091 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001092 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1093 * values were filled.
1094 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1095 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001096 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001097 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001098 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1099 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001100 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001101 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001102 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001103 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1104 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1105 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001106 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001107struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1108 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001109 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001110 u32 ampdu_reference;
1111 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001112 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001113 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001114 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001115 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001116 u8 rx_flags;
1117 u8 band;
1118 u8 antenna;
1119 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001120 u8 chains;
1121 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001122 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001123};
1124
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001125/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001126 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1127 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1128 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1129 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1130 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1131 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1132 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1133 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1134 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1135 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1136 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1137 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1138 * @data field.
1139 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1140 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1141 * length
1142 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1143 *
1144 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1145 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1146 * data.
1147 */
1148struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1149 u32 present;
1150 u8 align;
1151 u8 oui[3];
1152 u8 subns;
1153 u8 pad;
1154 u16 len;
1155 u8 data[];
1156} __packed;
1157
1158/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001159 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1160 *
1161 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1162 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001163 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1164 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1165 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001166 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1167 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1168 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1169 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1170 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1171 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1172 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001173 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1174 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1175 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1176 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1177 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001178 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1179 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001180 */
1181enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001182 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001183 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001184 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001185 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001186};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001187
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001188
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001189/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001190 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1191 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001192 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001193 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001194 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001195 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001196 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001197 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001198 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001199 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001200 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1201 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001202 */
1203enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001204 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001205 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001206 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001207 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001208 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1209 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1210 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001211 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001212};
1213
1214/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001215 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1216 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001217 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1218 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1219 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1220 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1221 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001222 */
1223enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1224 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1225 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1226 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1227 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1228
1229 /* keep last */
1230 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1231};
1232
1233/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001234 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1235 *
1236 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1237 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001238 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1239 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001240 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001241 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001242 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1243 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1244 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1245 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001246 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1247 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1248 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001249 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1250 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1251 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1252 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001253 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1254 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001255 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001256 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001257 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001258 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001259 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001260 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1261 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001262 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001263 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1264 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001265 *
1266 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1267 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001268 * configured for an HT channel.
1269 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1270 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001271 */
1272struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001273 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001274 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001275 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001276
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001277 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001278 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001279
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001280 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1281
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001282 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001283 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001284 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001285};
1286
1287/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001288 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1289 *
1290 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1291 * operation.
1292 *
1293 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1294 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1295 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1296 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001297 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1298 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001299 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1300 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001301 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001302 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1303 */
1304struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1305 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001306 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001307 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001308 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001309 u8 count;
1310};
1311
1312/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001313 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1314 *
1315 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1316 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001317 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1318 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1319 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1320 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001321 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1322 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1323 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1324 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001325 */
1326enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1327 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001328 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001329 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001330};
1331
1332/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001333 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1334 *
1335 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1336 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1337 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001338 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001339 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1340 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001341 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001342 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1343 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001344 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1345 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1346 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001347 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1348 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1349 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1350 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001351 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1352 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001353 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1354 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1355 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1356 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1357 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001358 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001359 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001360 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001361 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1362 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001363 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001364 */
1365struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001366 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001367 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001368 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001369 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001370 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001371
1372 u8 cab_queue;
1373 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1374
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001375 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1376
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001377 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1378
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001379 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001380
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001381#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1382 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1383#endif
1384
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001385 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001386 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001387};
1388
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001389static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1390{
1391#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001392 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001393#endif
1394 return false;
1395}
1396
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001397/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001398 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1399 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1400 *
1401 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1402 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1403 *
1404 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1405 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1406 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1407 */
1408struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1409
1410/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001411 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1412 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1413 *
1414 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1415 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1416 *
1417 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1418 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1419 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1420 */
1421struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1422
1423/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001424 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1425 *
1426 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1427 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1428 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001429 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1430 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001431 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1432 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001433 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1434 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1435 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001436 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1437 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001438 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001439 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1440 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001441 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001442 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001443 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001444 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1445 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1446 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001447 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1448 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1449 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1450 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1451 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1452 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1453 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001454 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001455 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001456 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001457 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1458 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1459 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001460 */
1461enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001462 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1463 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1464 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1465 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1466 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1467 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1468 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001469 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001470};
1471
1472/**
1473 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1474 *
1475 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1476 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1477 *
1478 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1479 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001480 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001481 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001482 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX on non-TKIP keys, may be used by the driver
1483 * as well if it needs to do software PN assignment by itself
1484 * (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001485 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1486 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1487 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001488 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1489 * data block:
1490 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1491 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1492 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001493 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1494 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001495 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001496struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001497 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001498 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001499 u8 icv_len;
1500 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001501 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001502 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001503 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001504 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001505 u8 key[0];
1506};
1507
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001508#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1509
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001510/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001511 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1512 *
1513 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1514 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1515 * reverse order than in packet)
1516 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1517 * reverse order than in packet)
1518 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1519 * reverse order than in packet)
1520 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1521 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001522 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001523 */
1524struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1525 union {
1526 struct {
1527 u32 iv32;
1528 u16 iv16;
1529 } tkip;
1530 struct {
1531 u8 pn[6];
1532 } ccmp;
1533 struct {
1534 u8 pn[6];
1535 } aes_cmac;
1536 struct {
1537 u8 pn[6];
1538 } aes_gmac;
1539 struct {
1540 u8 pn[6];
1541 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001542 struct {
1543 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1544 u8 seq_len;
1545 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001546 };
1547};
1548
1549/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001550 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1551 *
1552 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1553 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1554 *
1555 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1556 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1557 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1558 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1559 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1560 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1561 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1562 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1563 * key_idx value calculation:
1564 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1565 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1566 */
1567struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1568 u32 cipher;
1569 u16 iftype;
1570 u8 hdr_len;
1571 u8 pn_len;
1572 u8 pn_off;
1573 u8 key_idx_off;
1574 u8 key_idx_mask;
1575 u8 key_idx_shift;
1576 u8 mic_len;
1577};
1578
1579/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001580 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1581 *
1582 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1583 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1584 *
1585 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1586 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1587 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001588enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001589 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001590};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001591
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001592/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001593 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1594 *
1595 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1596 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1597 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1598 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1599 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1600 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1601 */
1602enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1603 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1604 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1605 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1606 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1607 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1608 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1609};
1610
1611/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001612 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1613 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1614 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1615 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1616 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1617 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1618 *
1619 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1620 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1621 */
1622enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1623 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1624 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1625 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1626 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1627};
1628
1629/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001630 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1631 *
1632 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001633 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001634 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1635 */
1636struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1637 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1638 struct {
1639 s8 idx;
1640 u8 count;
1641 u8 count_cts;
1642 u8 count_rts;
1643 u16 flags;
1644 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1645};
1646
1647/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001648 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1649 *
1650 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1651 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1652 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1653 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1654 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001655 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001656 *
1657 * @addr: MAC address
1658 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001659 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001660 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1661 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001662 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1663 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001664 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1665 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001666 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1667 * if wme is supported.
1668 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001669 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001670 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1671 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1672 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1673 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001674 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001675 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001676 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001677 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1678 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
SenthilKumar Jegadeesan64a8cef2015-03-02 13:29:40 +05301679 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001680 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001681 */
1682struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001683 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001684 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1685 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001686 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001687 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001688 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001689 u8 uapsd_queues;
1690 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001691 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001692 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001693 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001694 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001695 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001696 bool tdls_initiator;
SenthilKumar Jegadeesan64a8cef2015-03-02 13:29:40 +05301697 bool mfp;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001698
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001699 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1700
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001701 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001702 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001703};
1704
1705/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001706 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1707 *
1708 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301709 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001710 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001711 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1712 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1713 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001714enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001715 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1716};
1717
1718/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001719 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1720 *
1721 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1722 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1723 */
1724struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1725 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1726};
1727
1728/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001729 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1730 *
1731 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1732 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1733 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1734 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001735 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001736 *
1737 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1738 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1739 */
1740struct ieee80211_txq {
1741 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1742 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1743 u8 tid;
1744 u8 ac;
1745
1746 /* must be last */
1747 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1748};
1749
1750/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001751 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1752 *
1753 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1754 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1755 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1756 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1757 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1758 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001759 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1760 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1761 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1762 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1763 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1764 * algorithm.
1765 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1766 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1767 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1768 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1769 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1770 * CCK frames.
1771 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001772 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1773 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1774 * the FCS at the end.
1775 *
1776 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1777 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1778 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1779 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1780 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1781 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001782 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001783 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001784 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1785 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1786 *
1787 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1788 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1789 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001790 *
1791 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1792 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1793 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1794 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1795 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001796 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1797 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1798 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1799 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1800 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001801 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1802 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1803 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301804 *
1805 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1806 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001807 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001808 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1809 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1810 *
1811 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1812 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1813 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1814 *
1815 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1816 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001817 *
1818 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1819 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001820 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301821 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1822 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1823 * the stack.
1824 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001825 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001826 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1827 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001828 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001829 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1830 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1831 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001832 *
1833 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1834 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1835 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1836 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1837 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1838 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001839 *
1840 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1841 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1842 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1843 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1844 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1845 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001846 *
1847 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1848 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1849 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001850 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001851 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1852 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1853 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001854 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001855 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1856 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1857 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1858 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001859 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1860 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1861 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1862 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1863 * supported cipher suites.
1864 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001865 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1866 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1867 * for frames.
1868 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001869 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1870 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1871 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1872 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001873 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001874 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1875 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1876 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001877 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1878 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1879 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001880 *
1881 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1882 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001883 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001884 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1885 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1886 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1887 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001888 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1889 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1890 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1891 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001892 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001893 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1894 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1895 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001896 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1897 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001898 */
1899enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001900 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001901 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1902 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001903 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1904 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001905 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001906 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001907 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001908 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1909 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1910 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1911 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1912 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1913 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001914 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001915 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001916 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL = 1<<16,
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001917 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301918 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001919 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001920 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001921 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001922 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001923 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001924 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001925 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001926 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001927 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001928 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001929 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001930 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001931};
1932
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001933/**
1934 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001935 *
1936 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1937 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1938 *
1939 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1940 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1941 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001942 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1943 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001944 *
1945 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1946 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001947 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1948 * along with this structure.
1949 *
1950 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1951 *
1952 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1953 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1954 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001955 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1956 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001957 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001958 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001959 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001960 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001961 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001962 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001963 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001964 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001965 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1966 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1967 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001968 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1969 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1970 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001971 *
1972 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1973 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001974 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1975 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001976 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1977 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001978 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1979 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001980 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001981 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1982 * can handle.
1983 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1984 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001985 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001986 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001987 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1988 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1989 * aggregation.
1990 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1991 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1992 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001993 *
1994 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1995 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1996 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001997 *
1998 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1999 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002000 *
2001 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2002 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2003 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
2004 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002005 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002006 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2007 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2008 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2009 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002010 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002011 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2012 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002013 *
2014 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2015 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2016 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2017 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2018 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2019 * neither enabled.
2020 *
2021 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2022 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2023 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002024 *
2025 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2026 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2027 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002028 *
2029 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
2030 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002031 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002032struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002033 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002034 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002035 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002036 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002037 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002038 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002039 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002040 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002041 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002042 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002043 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002044 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002045 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002046 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002047 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002048 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002049 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002050 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002051 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002052 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002053 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002054 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002055 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002056 u8 uapsd_queues;
2057 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002058 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2059 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002060 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002061};
2062
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002063/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002064 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2065 *
2066 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2067 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2068 */
2069struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2070 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2071
2072 /* Keep last */
2073 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2074};
2075
2076/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002077 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2078 *
2079 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2080 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2081 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2082 * @status: channel-switch response status
2083 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2084 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2085 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2086 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2087 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2088 */
2089struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2090 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2091 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2092 u8 action_code;
2093 u32 status;
2094 u32 timestamp;
2095 u16 switch_time;
2096 u16 switch_timeout;
2097 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2098 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2099};
2100
2101/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002102 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2103 *
2104 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2105 *
2106 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2107 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2108 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2109 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2110 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002111 *
2112 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002113 */
2114struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2115
2116/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002117 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2118 *
2119 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2120 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2121 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002122static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2123{
2124 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2125}
2126
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002127/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002128 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002129 *
2130 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2131 * @addr: the address to set
2132 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002133static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
2134{
2135 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2136}
2137
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002138static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2139ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002140 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002141{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002142 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002143 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002144 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002145}
2146
2147static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2148ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002149 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002150{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002151 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002152 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002153 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002154}
2155
2156static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2157ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002158 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002159{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002160 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002161 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002162 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002163}
2164
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002165/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002166 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2167 * @hw: the hardware
2168 * @skb: the skb
2169 *
2170 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2171 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2172 */
2173void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2174
2175/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002176 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002177 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002178 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2179 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2180 *
2181 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2182 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002183 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2184 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2185 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002186 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2187 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2188 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002189 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2190 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2191 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2192 *
2193 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2194 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2195 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2196 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2197 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002198 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2199 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2200 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2201 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2202 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002203 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2204 *
2205 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2206 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2207 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2208 * based on the receive flags.
2209 *
2210 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2211 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2212 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2213 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002214 *
2215 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2216 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2217 * handler.
2218 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002219 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002220 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2221 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002222 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002223 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002224 *
2225 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2226 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2227 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002228 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002229
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002230/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002231 * DOC: Powersave support
2232 *
2233 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2234 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002235 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2236 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2237 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2238 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2239 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2240 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2241 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2242 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002243 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002244 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2245 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2246 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002247 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2248 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002249 *
2250 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2251 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2252 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002253 *
2254 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2255 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2256 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2257 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002258 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2259 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002260 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002261 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002262 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2263 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2264 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2265 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2266 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2267 * periods.
2268 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002269 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002270 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2271 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2272 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2273 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2274 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2275 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2276 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2277 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2278 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2279 *
2280 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002281 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002282 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002283 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2284 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2285 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2286 *
2287 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2288 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002289 */
2290
2291/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002292 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2293 *
2294 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002295 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002296 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2297 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2298 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2299 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2300 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2301 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002302 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2303 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002304 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2305 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2306 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2307 *
2308 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2309 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2310 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2311 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2312 *
2313 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2314 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2315 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2316 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2317 * - a list of information element IDs
2318 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2319 *
2320 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2321 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2322 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2323 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2324 * vendor information elements.
2325 *
2326 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2327 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2328 *
2329 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2330 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2331 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2332 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2333 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2334 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2335 *
2336 *
2337 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2338 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2339 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2340 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2341 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2342 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2343 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2344 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2345 *
2346 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2347 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2348 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002349 */
2350
2351/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002352 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2353 *
2354 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2355 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2356 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2357 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2358 *
2359 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2360 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2361 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2362 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2363 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2364 * hardware flags.
2365 *
2366 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2367 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2368 * turned off otherwise.
2369 *
2370 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2371 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2372 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2373 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2374 */
2375
2376/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002377 * DOC: Frame filtering
2378 *
2379 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2380 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2381 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2382 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2383 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2384 *
2385 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2386 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2387 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2388 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002389 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2390 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2391 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2392 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2393 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2394 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2395 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002396 *
2397 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2398 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2399 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2400 * or dropped.
2401 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002402 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2403 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2404 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2405 * the flag, but not clear it.
2406 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2407 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2408 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2409 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2410 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2411 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2412 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2413 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002414 */
2415
2416/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002417 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2418 *
2419 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2420 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2421 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2422 *
2423 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2424 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2425 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2426 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2427 * the driver code.
2428 *
2429 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2430 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2431 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2432 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2433 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2434 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2435 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2436 *
2437 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2438 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2439 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2440 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2441 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2442 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2443 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2444 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2445 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2446 * @sta_notify callback.
2447 *
2448 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2449 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2450 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2451 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2452 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2453 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2454 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002455 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002456 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2457 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2458 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2459 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2460 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2461 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2462 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002463 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2464 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2465 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002466 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2467 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2468 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2469 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2470 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2471 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2472 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2473 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2474 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2475 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2476 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2477 *
2478 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2479 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2480 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2481 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2482 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2483 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2484 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2485 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2486 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2487 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002488 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002489 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2490 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2491 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2492 *
2493 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2494 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2495 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2496 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2497 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002498 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002499 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2500 *
2501 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2502 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2503 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2504 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002505 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002506 *
2507 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2508 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2509 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2510 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002511 */
2512
2513/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002514 * DOC: HW queue control
2515 *
2516 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2517 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2518 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2519 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2520 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2521 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2522 *
2523 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2524 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2525 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2526 *
2527 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2528 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2529 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2530 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2531 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2532 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2533 * the hardware queue.
2534 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2535 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2536 *
2537 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2538 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2539 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2540 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2541 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2542 *
2543 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2544 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2545 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2546 * off-channel queue: 9
2547 *
2548 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2549 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2550 *
2551 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2552 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2553 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2554 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2555 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2556 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2557 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2558 *
2559 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2560 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2561 *
2562 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2563 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2564 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2565 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2566 */
2567
2568/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002569 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2570 *
2571 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2572 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2573 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2574 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2575 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002576 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2577 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2578 * multicast address.
2579 *
2580 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2581 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2582 *
2583 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2584 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2585 *
2586 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2587 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2588 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2589 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2590 * honour this flag if possible.
2591 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002592 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2593 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002594 *
2595 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002596 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002597 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2598 * those addressed to this station.
2599 *
2600 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002601 */
2602enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002603 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2604 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2605 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2606 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2607 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2608 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002609 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002610 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002611};
2612
2613/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002614 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2615 *
2616 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2617 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002618 *
2619 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2620 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002621 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002622 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2623 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002624 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2625 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2626 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002627 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002628 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2629 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2630 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2631 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2632 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2633 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2634 * session is gone and removes the station.
2635 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2636 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2637 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2638 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002639 */
2640enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2641 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2642 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002643 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002644 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2645 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2646 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002647 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002648};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002649
2650/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002651 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2652 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002653 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2654 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002655 */
2656enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2657 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002658 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002659};
2660
2661/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002662 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2663 *
2664 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002665 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2666 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2667 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002668 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002669 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2670 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2671 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002672 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2673 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002674 */
2675enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2676 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2677 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002678 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002679 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002680};
2681
2682/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002683 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2684 *
2685 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2686 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2687 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2688 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2689 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2690 *
2691 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2692 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2693 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2694 */
2695enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2696 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2697 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2698};
2699
2700/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002701 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2702 *
2703 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2704 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2705 *
2706 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2707 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2708 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2709 * of wowlan configuration)
2710 */
2711enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2712 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2713 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2714};
2715
2716/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002717 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2718 *
2719 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2720 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2721 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2722 *
2723 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2724 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2725 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002726 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002727 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002728 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002729 *
2730 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2731 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2732 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2733 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2734 * or zero.
2735 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2736 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2737 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002738 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002739 *
2740 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2741 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2742 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2743 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002744 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2745 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002746 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002747 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002748 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2749 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2750 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2751 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2752 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002753 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2754 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2755 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2756 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002757 *
2758 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2759 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2760 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2761 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2762 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2763 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002764 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2765 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2766 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2767 * in suspend().
2768 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002769 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002770 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002771 * and @stop must be implemented.
2772 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2773 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2774 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2775 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2776 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002777 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002778 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002779 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2780 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2781 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2782 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2783 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2784 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002785 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2786 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2787 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2788 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2789 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2790 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2791 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002792 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002793 *
2794 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2795 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002796 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002797 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002798 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002799 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2800 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2801 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2802 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2803 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002804 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2805 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002806 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002807 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2808 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2809 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2810 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002811 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2812 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002813 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002814 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002815 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002816 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002817 *
2818 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002819 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2820 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002821 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002822 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002823 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002824 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002825 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2826 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2827 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002828 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002829 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002830 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2831 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2832 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2833 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2834 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2835 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002836 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2837 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2838 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2839 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002840 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002841 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002842 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2843 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002844 * that power save is disabled.
2845 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2846 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2847 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2848 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2849 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2850 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2851 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002852 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002853 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002854 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2855 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2856 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2857 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2858 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2859 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2860 * The callback can sleep.
2861 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002862 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2863 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2864 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2865 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2866 *
2867 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002868 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002869 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002870 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2871 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002872 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2873 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2874 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002875 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002876 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2877 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2878 * this notification.
2879 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002880 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002881 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2882 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002883 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002884 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02002885 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
2886 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
2887 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002888 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002889 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002890 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2891 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2892 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2893 * The callback can sleep.
2894 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002895 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002896 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002897 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002898 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2899 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2900 *
2901 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002902 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2903 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2904 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2905 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2906 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002907 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302908 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2909 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2910 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2911 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2912 *
2913 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2914 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2915 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002916 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002917 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2918 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2919 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002920 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002921 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2922 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2923 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2924 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002925 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2926 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2927 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2928 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2929 * The callback can sleep.
2930 *
2931 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2932 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2933 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2934 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2935 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002936 * The callback can sleep.
2937 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002938 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2939 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2940 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2941 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2942 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2943 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2944 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002945 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2946 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2947 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002948 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002949 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2950 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2951 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2952 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2953 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2954 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2955 * The callback can sleep.
2956 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002957 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002958 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002959 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002960 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002961 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002962 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002963 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002964 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002965 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002966 *
2967 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002968 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002969 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002970 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002971 *
2972 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2973 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2974 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2975 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002976 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002977 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002978 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2979 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2980 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002981 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002982 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002983 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002984 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2985 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2986 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2987 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002988 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002989 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002990 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2991 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002992 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2993 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2994 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2995 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2996 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2997 * - TX: 1.....7
2998 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2999 * - TX: 8..1...
3000 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3001 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3002 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3003 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3004 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003005 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003006 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003007 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003008 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3009 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003010 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3011 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3012 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003013 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003014 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003015 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3016 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003017 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3018 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3019 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003020 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003021 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3022 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003023 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003024 *
3025 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003026 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3027 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3028 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3029 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003030 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003031 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003032 *
3033 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3034 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3035 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3036 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003037 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003038 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3039 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3040 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3041 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3042 *
3043 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003044 *
3045 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3046 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3047 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3048 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3049 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3050 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003051 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003052 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3053 * must be accepted in this case.
3054 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003055 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3056 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003057 *
3058 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3059 *
3060 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303061 *
3062 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3063 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303064 *
3065 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3066 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3067 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003068 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3069 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003070 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003071 *
3072 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3073 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3074 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3075 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003076 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003077 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3078 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3079 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3080 * more-data bit must always be set.
3081 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3082 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003083 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3084 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3085 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3086 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3087 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3088 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003089 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3090 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3091 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003092 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3093 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003094 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003095 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003096 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003097 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3098 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3099 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003100 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003101 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3102 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3103 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3104 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003105 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003106 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003107 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3108 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3109 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003110 *
3111 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3112 *
3113 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3114 *
3115 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3116 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3117 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003118 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3119 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3120 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3121 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3122 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3123 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3124 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3125 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3126 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3127 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3128 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3129 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003130 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003131 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3132 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3133 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3134 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3135 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3136 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3137 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3138 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3139 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003140 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3141 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3142 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3143 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3144 * channel context with different settings
3145 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3146 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3147 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3148 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003149 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3150 * another, as specified in the list of
3151 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3152 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3153 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003154 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3155 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3156 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3157 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3158 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3159 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3160 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003161 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003162 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3163 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3164 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3165 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3166 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003167 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003168 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3169 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3170 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003171 *
3172 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3173 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3174 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003175 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003176 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3177 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003178 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003179 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003180 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3181 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003182 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3183 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3184 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3185 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003186 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3187 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3188 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003189 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003190 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3191 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3192 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3193 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003194 *
3195 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3196 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3197 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003198 *
3199 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3200 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003201 *
3202 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3203 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3204 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3205 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3206 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3207 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3208 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3209 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3210 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003211 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3212 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3213 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3214 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3215 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3216 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3217 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003218 *
3219 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003220 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003221struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003222 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3223 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3224 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003225 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003226 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003227#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3228 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3229 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003230 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003231#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003232 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003233 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003234 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3235 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003236 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003237 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003238 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003239 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003240 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3241 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3242 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3243 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003244
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003245 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3246 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3247
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003248 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003249 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003250 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3251 unsigned int changed_flags,
3252 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003253 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003254 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3255 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003256 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003257 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003258 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003259 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003260 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3261 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3262 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3263 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003264 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3266 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003267 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003269 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003270 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003271 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3272 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003273 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3274 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3275 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003276 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003277 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003278 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003279 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3280 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3281 const u8 *mac_addr);
3282 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3283 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003284 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3285 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003286 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3287 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3288 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003289 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003290 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003291 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3292 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3293 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3294 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303295#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3296 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3297 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3298 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3299 struct dentry *dir);
3300 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3301 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3302 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3303 struct dentry *dir);
3304#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003305 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003306 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003307 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3308 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3309 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3310 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003311 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3312 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3313 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003314 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3315 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3316 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3317 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003318 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3319 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3320 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003321 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3322 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3323 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3324 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003325 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003326 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003327 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003328 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3329 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3330 u64 tsf);
3331 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003332 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003333 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003334 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003335 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003336 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3337 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003338 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3339 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003340 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003341 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003342#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003343 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3344 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003345 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3346 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3347 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003348#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003349 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3350 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003351 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003352 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003353 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003354 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3355 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003356
3357 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003358 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003359 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003360 int duration,
3361 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003362 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003363 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3364 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3365 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303366 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303367 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3368 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003369 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3370 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3371 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003372
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003373 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3374 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3375 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3376 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3377 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003378 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3379 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3380 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3381 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3382 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003383
3384 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3385 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3386 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3387 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3388 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3389 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3391 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003392
3393 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3394 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003395
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003396 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3397 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3398
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003399 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3400 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3401 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3402 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3403 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3404 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3405 u32 changed);
3406 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3407 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3408 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3409 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3411 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003412 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3413 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3414 int n_vifs,
3415 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003416
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003417 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3418 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003419
3420#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3421 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3422 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3423 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3424#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003425 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3426 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3427 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003428 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3429 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3430 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003431
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003432 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3433 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3434
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003435 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3436 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003437 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003438 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3439 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003440
3441 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3442 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3443 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3444 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003445 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003446 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3447 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003449 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3450 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3451 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003452
3453 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3454 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003455};
3456
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003457/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003458 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3459 *
3460 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3461 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3462 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3463 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3464 * @priv_data_len.
3465 *
3466 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3467 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3468 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3469 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3470 *
3471 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3472 */
3473struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3474 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3475 const char *requested_name);
3476
3477/**
3478 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003479 *
3480 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3481 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3482 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3483 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3484 * @priv_data_len.
3485 *
3486 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3487 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003488 *
3489 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003490 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003491static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003492struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003493 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3494{
3495 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3496}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003497
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003498/**
3499 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3500 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003501 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3502 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3503 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003504 *
3505 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003506 *
3507 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003508 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003509int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3510
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003511/**
3512 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3513 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3514 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3515 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3516 */
3517struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3518 int throughput;
3519 int blink_time;
3520};
3521
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003522/**
3523 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3524 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3525 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3526 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3527 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3528 */
3529enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3530 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3531 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3532 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3533};
3534
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003535#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003536const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3537const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3538const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3539const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3540const char *
3541__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3542 unsigned int flags,
3543 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3544 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003545#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003546/**
3547 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3548 *
3549 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3550 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3551 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3552 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3553 *
3554 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003555 *
3556 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003557 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003558static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003559{
3560#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3561 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3562#else
3563 return NULL;
3564#endif
3565}
3566
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003567/**
3568 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3569 *
3570 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3571 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3572 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3573 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3574 *
3575 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003576 *
3577 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003578 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003579static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003580{
3581#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3582 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3583#else
3584 return NULL;
3585#endif
3586}
3587
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003588/**
3589 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3590 *
3591 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3592 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3593 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3594 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3595 *
3596 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003597 *
3598 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003599 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003600static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003601{
3602#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3603 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3604#else
3605 return NULL;
3606#endif
3607}
3608
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003609/**
3610 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3611 *
3612 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3613 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3614 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3615 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3616 *
3617 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003618 *
3619 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003620 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003621static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003622{
3623#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3624 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3625#else
3626 return NULL;
3627#endif
3628}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003629
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003630/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003631 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3632 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003633 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003634 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3635 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3636 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003637 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3638 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3639 *
3640 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003641 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003642static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003643ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003644 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3645 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3646{
3647#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003648 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003649 blink_table_len);
3650#else
3651 return NULL;
3652#endif
3653}
3654
3655/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003656 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3657 *
3658 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3659 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3660 *
3661 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3662 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003663void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3664
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003665/**
3666 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3667 *
3668 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3669 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003670 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003671 *
3672 * @hw: the hardware to free
3673 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003674void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3675
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003676/**
3677 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3678 *
3679 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3680 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3681 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3682 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3683 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3684 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3685 *
3686 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3687 */
3688void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3689
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003690/**
3691 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3692 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3693 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3694 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3695 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3696 * @poll: poll function
3697 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003698 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003699 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003700 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003701void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3702 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3703 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3704 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003705
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003706/**
3707 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3708 *
3709 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003710 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3711 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3712 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3713 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003714 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003715 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003716 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3717 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003718 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3719 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003720 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003721 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003722 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003723 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3724 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003725 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003726void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003727
3728/**
3729 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3730 *
3731 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003732 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3733 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003734 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003735 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3736 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003737 *
3738 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3739 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003740 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003741void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003742
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003743/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003744 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3745 *
3746 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3747 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3748 *
3749 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003750 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3751 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003752 *
3753 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3754 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3755 */
3756static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3757 struct sk_buff *skb)
3758{
3759 local_bh_disable();
3760 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3761 local_bh_enable();
3762}
3763
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003764/**
3765 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3766 *
3767 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3768 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3769 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3770 *
3771 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3772 *
3773 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3774 * each other.
3775 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003776 * @sta: currently connected sta
3777 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003778 *
3779 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003780 */
3781int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3782
3783/**
3784 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3785 * (in process context)
3786 *
3787 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3788 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3789 * applies.
3790 *
3791 * @sta: currently connected sta
3792 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003793 *
3794 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003795 */
3796static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3797 bool start)
3798{
3799 int ret;
3800
3801 local_bh_disable();
3802 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3803 local_bh_enable();
3804
3805 return ret;
3806}
3807
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003808/*
3809 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3810 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3811 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003812#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003813
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003814/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003815 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003816 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003817 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3818 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003819 *
3820 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003821 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3822 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003823 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003824 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3825 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3826 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3827 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3828 *
3829 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3830 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3831 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3832 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3833 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3834 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3835 *
3836 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3837 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3838 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3839 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3840 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003841 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003842void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3843 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003844
3845/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003846 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3847 *
3848 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3849 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3850 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3851 *
3852 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3853 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3854 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3855 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3856 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3857 */
3858void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3859 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3860 struct sk_buff *skb,
3861 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3862 int max_rates);
3863
3864/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003865 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3866 *
3867 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3868 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3869 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3870 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003871 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3872 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003873 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003874 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3875 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003876 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003877 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3878 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003879 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003880void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003881 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003882
3883/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003884 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3885 *
3886 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3887 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3888 * specific skbs.
3889 *
3890 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3891 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3892 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3893 *
3894 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3895 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3896 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3897 * @info: tx status information
3898 */
3899void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3900 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3901 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3902
3903/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003904 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3905 *
3906 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3907 *
3908 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3909 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3910 * for a single hardware.
3911 *
3912 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3913 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3914 */
3915static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3916 struct sk_buff *skb)
3917{
3918 local_bh_disable();
3919 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3920 local_bh_enable();
3921}
3922
3923/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003924 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003925 *
3926 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3927 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3928 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003929 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3930 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003931 *
3932 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3933 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003934 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003935void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003936 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003937
3938/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003939 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3940 *
3941 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3942 * connected STA.
3943 *
3944 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3945 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3946 */
3947void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3948
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003949#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3950
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003951/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003952 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3953 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3954 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003955 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3956 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3957 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003958 */
3959struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3960 u16 tim_offset;
3961 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003962
3963 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003964};
3965
3966/**
3967 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3968 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3969 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3970 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3971 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3972 *
3973 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3974 * obtain the beacon template.
3975 *
3976 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3977 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003978 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3979 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003980 *
3981 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3982 *
3983 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3984 */
3985struct sk_buff *
3986ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3987 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3988 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3989
3990/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003991 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3992 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003993 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003994 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3995 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3996 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3997 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3998 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3999 *
4000 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004001 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004002 *
4003 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4004 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004005 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4006 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004007 *
4008 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004009 *
4010 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004011 */
4012struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4013 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4014 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4015
4016/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004017 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4018 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004019 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004020 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004021 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004022 *
4023 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004024 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004025static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4026 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4027{
4028 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4029}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004030
4031/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004032 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4033 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4034 *
4035 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4036 * This function is called implicitly when
4037 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4038 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4039 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4040 *
4041 * Return: new csa counter value
4042 */
4043u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4044
4045/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004046 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4047 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4048 *
4049 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004050 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004051 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4052 */
4053void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4054
4055/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004056 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004057 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4058 *
4059 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4060 */
4061bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4062
4063
4064/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004065 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4066 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4067 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4068 *
4069 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4070 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4071 *
4072 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004073 *
4074 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004075 */
4076struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4077 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4078
4079/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004080 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4081 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4082 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4083 *
4084 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4085 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4086 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4087 *
4088 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4089 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004090 *
4091 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004092 */
4093struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4095
4096/**
4097 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4098 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4099 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4100 *
4101 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4102 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4103 * BSSID and address is used.
4104 *
4105 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4106 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004107 *
4108 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004109 */
4110struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4111 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4112
4113/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004114 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4115 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004116 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004117 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4118 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004119 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004120 *
4121 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4122 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004123 *
4124 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004125 */
4126struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004127 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004128 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004129 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004130
4131/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004132 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4133 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004134 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004135 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4136 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004137 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004138 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4139 *
4140 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4141 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4142 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4143 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4144 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004145void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004146 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004147 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004148 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4149
4150/**
4151 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4152 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004153 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004154 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004155 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004156 *
4157 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4158 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4159 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004160 *
4161 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004162 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004163__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4164 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004165 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004166
4167/**
4168 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4169 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004170 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004171 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4172 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004173 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004174 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4175 *
4176 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4177 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4178 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4179 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4180 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004181void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004183 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004184 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004185 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4186
4187/**
4188 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4189 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004190 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004191 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004192 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004193 *
4194 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4195 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4196 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004197 *
4198 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004199 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004200__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4201 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004202 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004203 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004204
4205/**
4206 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4207 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004208 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004209 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004210 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004211 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004212 *
4213 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4214 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004215 *
4216 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004217 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004218__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4219 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004220 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004221 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004222 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004223
4224/**
4225 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4226 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004227 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004228 *
4229 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4230 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4231 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4232 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004233 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4234 *
4235 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4236 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004237 *
4238 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4239 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4240 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4241 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4242 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4243 * use common code for all beacons.
4244 */
4245struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004246ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004247
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004248/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004249 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4250 *
4251 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4252 *
4253 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4254 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4255 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4256 */
4257void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4258 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4259
4260/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004261 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004262 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004263 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4264 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004265 *
4266 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004267 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4268 * with this P1K
4269 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004270 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004271static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4272 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4273{
4274 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4275 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4276 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4277
4278 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4279}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004280
4281/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004282 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4283 *
4284 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4285 * and transmitter address.
4286 *
4287 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4288 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4289 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4290 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4291 */
4292void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4293 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4294
4295/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004296 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4297 *
4298 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4299 * in the packet.
4300 *
4301 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4302 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4303 * encrypted with this key
4304 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4305 */
4306void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4307 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004308
4309/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004310 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4311 *
4312 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4313 * previously installed master key.
4314 *
4315 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4316 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4317 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4318 */
4319void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4320 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4321
4322/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004323 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4324 *
4325 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4326 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4327 *
4328 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4329 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4330 * offloaded to the device.
4331 *
4332 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4333 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4334 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4335 */
4336void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4337 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4338
4339/**
4340 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4341 *
4342 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004343 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004344 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4345 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4346 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4347 *
4348 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4349 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4350 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4351 *
4352 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4353 * can be done concurrently.
4354 */
4355void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4356 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4357
4358/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004359 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4360 *
4361 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4362 * @seq: new sequence data
4363 *
4364 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4365 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4366 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4367 * ARP requests.
4368 *
4369 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4370 * can be done concurrently.
4371 */
4372void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4373 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4374
4375/**
4376 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4377 *
4378 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004379 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004380 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4381 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4382 * @seq: new sequence data
4383 *
4384 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4385 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4386 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4387 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4388 *
4389 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4390 * can be done concurrently.
4391 */
4392void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4393 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4394
4395/**
4396 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4397 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4398 *
4399 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4400 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4401 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4402 *
4403 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4404 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4405 */
4406void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4407
4408/**
4409 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4410 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4411 * @keyconf: new key data
4412 *
4413 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4414 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4415 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4416 *
4417 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4418 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4419 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4420 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4421 *
4422 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4423 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4424 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4425 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4426 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4427 * of the reconfiguration.
4428 *
4429 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4430 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4431 *
4432 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4433 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4434 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4435 * the key that's being replaced.
4436 */
4437struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4438ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4439 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4440
4441/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004442 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4443 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4444 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4445 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4446 * @gfp: allocation flags
4447 */
4448void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4449 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4450
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004451/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004452 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4453 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4454 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4455 *
4456 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4457 */
4458void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4459
4460/**
4461 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4462 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4463 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4464 *
4465 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4466 */
4467void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4468
4469/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004470 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4471 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4472 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4473 *
4474 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004475 *
4476 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004477 */
4478
4479int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4480
4481/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004482 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4483 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4484 *
4485 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4486 */
4487void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4488
4489/**
4490 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4491 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4492 *
4493 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4494 */
4495void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4496
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004497/**
4498 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4499 *
4500 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4501 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004502 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4503 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004504 *
4505 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004506 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004507 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004508void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004509
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004510/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004511 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4512 *
4513 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4514 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4515 *
4516 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4517 */
4518void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4519
4520/**
4521 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4522 *
4523 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4524 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4525 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4526 * while associating, for instance.
4527 *
4528 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4529 */
4530void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4531
4532/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004533 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4534 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4535 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4536 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4537 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4538 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4539 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4540 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004541 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004542 */
4543enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4544 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4545 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004546 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004547};
4548
4549/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004550 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4551 *
4552 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4553 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4554 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4555 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4556 *
4557 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4558 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4559 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4560 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4561 */
4562void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4563 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4564 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4565 void *data);
4566
4567/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004568 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004569 *
4570 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4571 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004572 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4573 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4574 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004575 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004576 *
4577 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004578 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004579 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004580 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4581 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004582static inline void
4583ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4584 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4585 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4586 void *data)
4587{
4588 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4589 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4590 iterator, data);
4591}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004592
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004593/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004594 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4595 *
4596 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4597 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4598 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4599 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004600 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004601 *
4602 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004603 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004604 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4605 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4606 */
4607void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004608 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004609 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4610 u8 *mac,
4611 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4612 void *data);
4613
4614/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004615 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4616 *
4617 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4618 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4619 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4620 *
4621 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4622 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4623 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4624 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4625 */
4626void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4627 u32 iter_flags,
4628 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4629 u8 *mac,
4630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4631 void *data);
4632
4633/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004634 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4635 *
4636 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4637 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4638 * function for them.
4639 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4640 *
4641 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4642 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4643 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4644 */
4645void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4646 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4647 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4648 void *data);
4649/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004650 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4651 *
4652 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4653 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4654 *
4655 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4656 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4657 */
4658void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4659
4660/**
4661 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4662 *
4663 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4664 * workqueue.
4665 *
4666 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4667 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4668 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4669 */
4670void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4671 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4672 unsigned long delay);
4673
4674/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004675 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004676 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004677 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304678 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004679 *
4680 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004681 *
4682 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4683 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4684 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4685 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304686int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4687 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004688
4689/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004690 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004691 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004692 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4693 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4694 *
4695 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004696 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4697 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004698 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004699void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004700 u16 tid);
4701
4702/**
4703 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004704 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004705 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004706 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004707 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004708 *
4709 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4710 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4711 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4712 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004713int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004714
4715/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004716 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004717 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004718 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4719 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4720 *
4721 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004722 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4723 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004724 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004725void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004726 u16 tid);
4727
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004728/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004729 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4730 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004731 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004732 * @addr: station's address
4733 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004734 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4735 *
4736 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004737 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4738 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004739struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004740 const u8 *addr);
4741
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004742/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004743 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004744 *
4745 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004746 * @addr: remote station's address
4747 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004748 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004749 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4750 *
4751 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004752 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4753 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004754 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4755 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4756 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4757 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4758 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4759 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4760 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004761 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004762 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004763 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004764struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4765 const u8 *addr,
4766 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004767
4768/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004769 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4770 * @hw: the hardware
4771 * @pubsta: the station
4772 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4773 *
4774 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4775 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4776 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4777 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4778 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4779 *
4780 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4781 * manner.
4782 *
4783 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4784 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4785 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4786 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4787 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4788 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4789 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4790 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4791 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4792 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4793 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4794 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4795 * woke up while blocked or not.
4796 */
4797void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4798 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4799
4800/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004801 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4802 * @pubsta: the station
4803 *
4804 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4805 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4806 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4807 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4808 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004809 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4810 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4811 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4812 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4813 *
4814 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4815 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4816 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4817 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004818 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004819void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004820
4821/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004822 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4823 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4824 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4825 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4826 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4827 *
4828 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4829 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4830 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4831 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4832 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4833 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004834 *
4835 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4836 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4837 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004838 */
4839void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4840 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4841 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4842 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4843 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4844 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4845 void *data),
4846 void *iter_data);
4847
4848/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004849 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4850 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4851 * @iter: iterator function
4852 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4853 *
4854 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4855 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4856 * places while calling into the driver.
4857 *
4858 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4859 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4860 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004861 *
4862 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4863 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4864 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4865 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004866 */
4867void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4868 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4869 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4870 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4871 void *data),
4872 void *iter_data);
4873
4874/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004875 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4876 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4877 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4878 *
4879 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4880 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4881 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4882 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4883 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004884 * %NULL.
4885 *
4886 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004887 */
4888struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4889 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4890
4891/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004892 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4893 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004894 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004895 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004896 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004897 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004898 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4899 */
4900void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004901
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004902/**
4903 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4904 *
4905 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4906 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004907 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004908 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4909 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004910 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4911 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004912 *
4913 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4914 * without connection recovery attempts.
4915 */
4916void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4917
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004918/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004919 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4920 *
4921 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4922 *
4923 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4924 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4925 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4926 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4927 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4928 *
4929 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4930 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4931 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4932 * disconnect normally later.
4933 *
4934 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4935 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4936 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4937 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4938 */
4939void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4940
4941/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004942 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4943 * rssi threshold triggered
4944 *
4945 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4946 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4947 * @gfp: context flags
4948 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004949 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004950 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4951 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4952 */
4953void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4954 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4955 gfp_t gfp);
4956
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004957/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004958 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4959 *
4960 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4961 * @gfp: context flags
4962 */
4963void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4964
4965/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004966 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4967 *
4968 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4969 */
4970void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4971
4972/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004973 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4974 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4975 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4976 *
4977 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4978 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4979 */
4980void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4981
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004982/**
4983 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4984 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004985 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004986 *
4987 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4988 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4989 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4990 */
4991void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4992 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4993
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004994/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004995 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4996 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4997 */
4998void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4999
5000/**
5001 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5002 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5003 */
5004void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5005
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005006/**
5007 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5008 *
5009 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5010 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5011 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5012 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5013 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5014 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5015 *
5016 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5017 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5018 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5019 */
5020void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5021 const u8 *addr);
5022
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005023/**
5024 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5025 *
5026 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5027 * buffer.
5028 *
5029 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5030 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5031 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5032 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5033 */
5034void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5035
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005036/**
5037 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5038 *
5039 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5040 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5041 * reordering.
5042 *
5043 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5044 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5045 *
5046 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5047 * @addr: station mac address
5048 * @tid: the rx tid
5049 */
5050void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5051 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5052
5053/**
5054 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5055 *
5056 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5057 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5058 * reordering.
5059 *
5060 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5061 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5062 *
5063 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5064 * @addr: station mac address
5065 * @tid: the rx tid
5066 */
5067void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5068 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5069
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005070/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005071
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005072/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005073 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005074 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005075 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5076 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5077 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005078 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5079 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005080 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5081 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5082 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5083 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5084 * RTS threshold
5085 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5086 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005087 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005088 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5089 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005090 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005091 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005092 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005093 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005094struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5095 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5096 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5097 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5098 struct sk_buff *skb;
5099 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5100 bool rts, short_preamble;
5101 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005102 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005103 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005104 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005105};
5106
5107struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005108 const char *name;
5109 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005110 void (*free)(void *priv);
5111
5112 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5113 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005114 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005115 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305116 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005117 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005118 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5119 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005120 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5121 void *priv_sta);
5122
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005123 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5124 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5125 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5126 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005127 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5128 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5129 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005130 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5131 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005132
5133 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5134 struct dentry *dir);
5135 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005136
5137 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005138};
5139
5140static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5141 enum ieee80211_band band,
5142 int index)
5143{
5144 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5145}
5146
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005147/**
5148 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5149 *
5150 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5151 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5152 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5153 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5154 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5155 * not null.
5156 *
5157 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5158 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5159 *
5160 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5161 * that this may be null.
5162 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5163 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5164 */
5165bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5166 void *priv_sta,
5167 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5168
5169
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005170static inline s8
5171rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5172 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5173{
5174 int i;
5175
5176 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5177 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5178 return i;
5179
5180 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005181 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005182
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005183 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005184 return 0;
5185}
5186
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005187static inline
5188bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5189 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5190{
5191 unsigned int i;
5192
5193 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5194 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5195 return true;
5196 return false;
5197}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005198
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005199/**
5200 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5201 *
5202 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5203 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5204 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5205 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5206 *
5207 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5208 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5209 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5210 */
5211int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5212 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5213 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5214
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005215int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5216void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005217
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005218static inline bool
5219conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5220{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005221 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005222}
5223
5224static inline bool
5225conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5226{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005227 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5228 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005229}
5230
5231static inline bool
5232conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5233{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005234 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5235 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005236}
5237
5238static inline bool
5239conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5240{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005241 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005242}
5243
5244static inline bool
5245conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5246{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005247 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5248 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5249 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005250}
5251
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005252static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5253ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5254{
5255 if (p2p) {
5256 switch (type) {
5257 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5258 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5259 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5260 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5261 default:
5262 break;
5263 }
5264 }
5265 return type;
5266}
5267
5268static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5269ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5270{
5271 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5272}
5273
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005274void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5275 int rssi_min_thold,
5276 int rssi_max_thold);
5277
5278void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005279
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005280/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005281 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005282 *
5283 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5284 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005285 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5286 *
5287 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5288 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005289 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005290int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5291
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005292/**
5293 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5294 * @vif: virtual interface
5295 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5296 * @gfp: allocation flags
5297 *
5298 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5299 */
5300void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5301 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5302 gfp_t gfp);
5303
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005304/**
5305 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5306 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5307 * @vif: virtual interface
5308 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5309 * @band: the band to transmit on
5310 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5311 *
5312 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5313 */
5314bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5315 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5316 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5317
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005318/**
5319 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5320 *
5321 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5322 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5323 *
5324 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5325 *
5326 * private:
5327 *
5328 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5329 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5330 */
5331struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5332 u32 next_tsf;
5333 bool has_next_tsf;
5334
5335 u8 absent;
5336
5337 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5338 struct {
5339 u32 start;
5340 u32 duration;
5341 u32 interval;
5342 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5343};
5344
5345/**
5346 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5347 *
5348 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5349 * @data: NoA tracking data
5350 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5351 *
5352 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5353 */
5354int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5355 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5356
5357/**
5358 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5359 *
5360 * @data: NoA tracking data
5361 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5362 */
5363void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5364
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005365/**
5366 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5367 * @vif: virtual interface
5368 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5369 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5370 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5371 * @gfp: allocation flags
5372 *
5373 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5374 */
5375void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5376 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5377 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005378
5379/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005380 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5381 *
5382 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5383 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5384 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5385 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5386 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5387 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5388 *
5389 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5390 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5391 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5392 *
5393 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5394 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5395 *
5396 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5397 */
5398int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5399
5400/**
5401 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5402 *
5403 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5404 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5405 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5406 *
5407 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5408 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5409 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5410 *
5411 * @sta: the station
5412 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5413 */
5414void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5415
5416/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005417 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5418 *
5419 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5420 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5421 *
5422 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5423 */
5424struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5425 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005426#endif /* MAC80211_H */